دليل مرجعي

ManualsBrandsNikon ManualsDigital CameraCOOLPIX S5200





Summary of content (284 pages)

PAGE 1
‫كامیرا رقمية‬ ‫دليل مرجعي‬ ‫‪Ar‬‬
PAGE 2
‫ﺃﺑﺮﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪COOLPIX S5200‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ p‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪39 ,30A .................................................‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﻴﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﺟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪i‬‬
PAGE 4
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ii‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ COOLPIX S5200‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ" )‪ (x-viiiA‬ﻭﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ "ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ" )‪.(13A‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ F/E/A‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ E‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪" :‬ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ" ﻭ‪ F‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪" :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪".
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ" ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻌﻬﺪ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞﹴ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪http://www.nikonusa.com/ :‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/ :‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﻗﻴﺎﻧﻮﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪http://www.nikon-asia.
PAGE 8
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭﺑﺄﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﹰﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻻﹰ ﺳﻴ ﹰﺌﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﹸﻌﺪ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺥﱠ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .
PAGE 12
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺍﻙ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺘﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 13
‫‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻭﻻ ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ )‪ (EU‬ﻭﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ )‪ (EFTA‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻭﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 14
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TRA‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪REGISTERED No.‬‬ ‫‪ER0102520/13‬‬ ‫‪DEALER No.‬‬ ‫‪DA0087468/12‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ii............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪1 ...............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪2 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪5.............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪6 ......................................... (d‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪8 ..............................................................................
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) d‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪67 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪68 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪70 .......‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪73 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪73 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪75 ...........................
PAGE 17
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪16E ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪18E .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪20E ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :D-Lighting‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪20E ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪21E ............................
PAGE 18
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪xvi‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺭﻣﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪102E.................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪104E..............................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪106E........................................... Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪107E......................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪110E.....................................Firmware‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪111E ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪113E ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪114E .............................
PAGE 19
xvii
PAGE 20
xviii
PAGE 21
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪2.................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪5.............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪6.............................................. (d‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪8.........................................................................
PAGE 22
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2 3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬
PAGE 23
‫‪ 1‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪30......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪29........................................‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ‪29.............................................‬‬ ‫‪ :g‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪29........................................................‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ :h‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪81................................‬‬ ‫‪ :i‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪80...................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :j‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪41.....................................................
PAGE 24
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪11 10‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬
PAGE 25
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪101E ,17...............................‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪57.................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪15 ,14 ..................‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪26..................................‬‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪14.................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ e) b‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ‪96........................‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺯﺭ ‪) c‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪82 ,32 ...........................................
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(d‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.d‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪25m 0s‬‬ ‫‪890‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 27
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍ ﹴﻥ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪.((104A‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪12 13‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪F3.
PAGE 29
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪27 ,26 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪62 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪62 ,29 ..................................................
PAGE 30
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪4 5 6‬‬ ‫‪2 3‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪15 / 05 / 2013 15:30‬‬ ‫‪9999.
PAGE 31
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪20..................................................‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ‪69E ,84 ..........................‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪20...................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪6E ,82 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫)‪ (a‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪32 ....................................‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫)‪ (b‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪100 ...................................
PAGE 32
12
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪14 .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪16 .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪18 ......................................................................................................................
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ‪ 1‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL19‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫)ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ )‪ (1‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )‪.(2‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫)‪ .(1‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )‪ .(2‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ‪ 2‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪.EH-70P‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ*‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮ ﹰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫* ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ )ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ( ﺟﺎﺭ ﹴ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ‪ 3‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 39
‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﹸﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ d‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪.k‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 41
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﺃﻭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪London, Casablanca‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.H‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ W‬ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 42
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ Language/‬ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻦ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪.(104A‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ K‬ﺛﻢ ‪ H‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ؛ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻭﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .
PAGE 43
23
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﺘﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻝﹴ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .
PAGE 45
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) c‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻤﺘﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪.k‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫‪40A‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺄﻃﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷﻌﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ )"ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ"(‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‪.
PAGE 49
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‬ ‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (58A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) W‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (104A‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )‪.(31A‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪ (75A) "AF‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 5‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) c‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪c‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ H :‬ﺃﻭ ‪J‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ I :‬ﺃﻭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 53
‫‪C‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﹰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ )‪ (73A‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ )‪ (48A‬ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 6‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ l‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ" )‪(35A‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪.K‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻒ ‪ K‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ‪.
PAGE 56
36
PAGE 57
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪38............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ( ‪40...................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ )ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪51......‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻴﻘﺔ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺴﻤﺔ( ‪53.....
PAGE 58
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (68A‬ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪.(68A) AF‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪.AF‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﹰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )‪.(111E‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ d‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍ ﹴﻥ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬ ‫‪K ،J‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ( ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ )‪ (3A‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ g (j‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ g (j‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪ c‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫• ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ (9A‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ d‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪ f‬ﺣﻔﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫)‪ (104A‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Z‬ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺛﻠﺞ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ h‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪ j‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ (9A‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ j‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 65
‫‪ u‬ﺃﻃﻌﻤﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪ (62A‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،k‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 66
‫‪ n‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪ (62A‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ o‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ o‬ﺍﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 67
‫‪ p‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ p‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )‪ (180°‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ )‪.(360°‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻭﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻂﺀ‪ .
PAGE 68
‫‪ O‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺏ ﻛﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ O‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .
PAGE 69
‫‪B‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ s‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪3D‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،k‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪B‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ )‪(86A‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ )ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪K ،J‬‬ ‫‪) D‬ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ*(‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪،I ،H‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ‪ 12‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﹰﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 72
‫• ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(57A‬‬‫ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪(60A‬‬‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪(62A‬‬‫ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ )‪(64A‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻴﻘﺔ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺴﻤﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺘﺴﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ ،(BSS‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (104A‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (41A‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )‪ (41A‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ )‪.(42A‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻴﻘﺔ )‪(53A‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ )‪.(84A‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ H‬ﻭ‪ I‬ﻭ‪ J‬ﻭ‪ K‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) X‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫‪) n‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪) o‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ(‬ ‫‪) p‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ" )‪ (65A‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ" )‪ (58A‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻀﻊ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥﹴ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪) U‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ D‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥﹴ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ )‪.(59A‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Y‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ "ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ" )ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ( ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻨﺎ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‪ .
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍ ﹴﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (104A‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫• ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OFF‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪F3.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 5‬ﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ p) I‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،ON‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪.k‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﻫﺞ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ F‬ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.
PAGE 83
‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 50‬ﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (69A) AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (68A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ AF‬ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ AF‬ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ(‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ o) K‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫• ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ )‪.(+‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫• ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ )–(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫‪+2.
PAGE 85
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)‪(57A‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪) D‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ(‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫)‪(60A‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫)‪(64A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫)‪(62A‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪1U‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪3‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪4U‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪5‬‬ ‫‪0.
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)‪(57A‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪(48A) O‬‬ ‫‪3W‬‬ ‫‪9Y‬‬ ‫‪(49A) s‬‬ ‫‪3W‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫)‪(62A‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪.(BSS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) W‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪) d‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ d‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪.(6A‬‬ ‫‪25m 0s‬‬ ‫‪890‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪AF‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪.4608×3456 P‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ( ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻭﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪55E‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AF‬ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ )‪ .(39A‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(68A‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺶ )‪(69A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ )‪(69A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ )‪(69A‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪(68A) AF‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪(68A) AF‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(68A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(68A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪(60A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪(68A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(68A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺶ )‪(69A‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ )‪(69A‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )‪(69A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(68A‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(68A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(68A) ISO‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪(68A) AF‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ )‪(69A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺭﻣﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺐ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(68A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(68A‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪(68A) AF‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(68A‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 94
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ (68A) AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪ ،AF‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫)ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪F3.5‬‬ ‫‪1/250‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪F3.
PAGE 96
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪.AF‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ (68A) AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻫﺞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪F3.
PAGE 98
78
PAGE 99
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪80......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪81...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ‪82.....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ‪84...............................................................
PAGE 100
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ g (i‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )‪ (32A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪15 / 05 / 2013 15:30‬‬ ‫‪0004. JPG‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4/‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫)‪(i‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫)‪(h‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫‪3.0‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ f (h‬ﺃﻭ )‪ .g (i‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ f (h‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )‪ (32A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪15 / 05 / 2013 15:30‬‬ ‫‪0004. JPG‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫)‪(h‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪1/‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫)‪(h‬‬ ‫‪2013 05‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪1/‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ f (h‬ﺃﻭ )‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪32A‬‬ ‫‪ h‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪6E‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )‪.(85A‬‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻓﺮﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.c‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ G‬ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) d‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(6A) d‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )‪ (h‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (F‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )‪ ،(C‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪2,1‬‬ ‫‪2,1 D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ‪2,1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪4,3‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﹸﺴﺦ ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ؛‬ ‫‪.(33A‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.d‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪26E‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ (D‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪30E‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫‪ ViewNX 2‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫™‪ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 8‬ﻭ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Mac OS X10.6‬ﻭ‪ 10.7‬ﻭ‪10.
PAGE 109
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ :Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 110
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Mac OS‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.Nikon Transfer 2‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Windows 7‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Nikon Transfer 2‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪Import pictures and videos‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫‪) Change program‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪Import‬‬ ‫‪) File using Nikon Transfer 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ (Nikon Transfer 2‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 113
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ .USB‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 114
94
PAGE 115
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ e) b‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪25m 0s‬‬ ‫‪890‬‬ ‫‪14m30s‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪96...............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) d‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ‪99 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪100..................................................................
PAGE 116
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ e) b‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ e) b‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪.(99A) 1080P/30p d‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪25m 0s‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪890‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 117
‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 118
‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥﹴ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪10s‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ )‪ (B10s‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺀ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) d‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪HS‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪) HS‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ c‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪.(99A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪15 / 05 / 2013 15:30‬‬ ‫‪0010. MOV‬‬ ‫‪10s‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )‪ (32A‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ )‪ (81A‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4s‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .
PAGE 122
102
PAGE 123
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.z‬‬ ‫‪890‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪25m 0s‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ" ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ )‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) d‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) z‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪104‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪Language/‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪TV‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺭﻣﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪96E‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪98E‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺑﺸﺮﻁ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.
PAGE 126
106
PAGE 127
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ "‪ "Wireless Mobile Utility‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Android OS‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،iOS‬ﻭﻭﺻﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Take Photos‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪*.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Google Play Store‬ﺃﻭ ‪App‬‬ ‫‪ Store‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ "‪Wireless Mobile‬‬ ‫‪."Utility‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪108‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻦ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SSID‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪،Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 130
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )‪ (SSID‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ )‪ ،(110A‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪.(9A) Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ‪2E ...............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪6E ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪10E ...................................................................................................................
PAGE 132
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫‪) p‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ(‬ ‫‪K ،J‬‬ ‫‪) x‬ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ*(‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )‪ (180°‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ )‪ (360°‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪2E‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 133
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﱢﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ ﻭﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ I‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬ ‫• ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 134
‫‪B‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺃﺿﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺴﻘﺎ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ (32A‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ )ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪15 / 05 / 2013 15:30‬‬ ‫‪0004. JPG‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4/‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 200‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.
PAGE 137
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪c‬‬ ‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ h‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ‪.L‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪ L‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ )‪ (3A‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ g (i‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ )‪ f (h‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪c‬‬ ‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.d‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪c‬‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻓﺮﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ :l‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪ O‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪ q‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ X‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫)‪(62A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻘﺮﺏ* )‪(40A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫)‪(48A‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ )‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪c‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪15/05/2013‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪10/05/2013‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ )ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.
PAGE 144
‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )‪ (73E‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ COOLPIX S5200‬ﻛﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ (73E‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،d‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )‪ (73E‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪:l‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫)‪ ،(35A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ COOLPIX S5200‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫)‪ .(111E‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )‪(18E‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )‪(20E‬‬ ‫‪(20E) D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ )‪(21E‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ )‪(23E‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ )‪(24E‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﹸﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 147
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺺ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 30‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(18E) 2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﻣﺸﺮﻕ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ‪،1‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ‪ ،2‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 149
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ V‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ s‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.
PAGE 151
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.(10A‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ‪ 640×480‬ﻭ‪ 320×240‬ﻭ‪.160×120‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 4608×2592 l‬ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ .640×360‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ )ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ(‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﻗﺺ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ u‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ .(80A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﹸ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.d‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺺ )‪.(80A‬‬ ‫‪24E‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ g (i‬ﺃﻭ )‪f (h‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.
PAGE 155
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ" ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻟﻘﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ‪ 320 × 240‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،160 × 120‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (68E‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺼﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ"‪ .
PAGE 156
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ(‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺍ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪،HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪26E‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺴﻲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(D‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ‪.
PAGE 158
‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ (99E) TV‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDMI-CEC‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 159
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ(‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ (23F) PictBridge‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 160
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪30E‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 161
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪/‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫‪ (1) PictBridge‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )‪.(2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ .USB‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪ (100E‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.
PAGE 162
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )‪ ،(30E‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻧﹸﺴﺦ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪15/05/2013‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ f (h‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭ)‪ g (i‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 163
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )‪ ،(30E‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.d‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.d‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪34E‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.
PAGE 165
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻧﹸﺴﺦ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ (99‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﹸ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﹸ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ M‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 166
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪.(60E‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 167
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2 / 10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 3.5×5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 5×7‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 100×150‬ﻣﻢ ﻭ‪ 4×6‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 8×10‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ‪ A3‬ﻭ‪ .A4‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺃﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻪ )‪.(100A‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ ،I‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ M‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ N‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 169
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ m‬ﺣﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.(74E) iFrame 540/30p p‬‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪ ،B‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 170
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ((‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﹼﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﹼﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ )‪.
PAGE 171
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪.(70A‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ (49A) 3D‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ )‪.(47A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 172
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ"‪ .
PAGE 173
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻇﻞ ﻟﻮﻧﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﻃﻊ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻈﻞ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻤﺎ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 174
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪.(70A‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) W‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ )‪.
PAGE 175
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ‪) BSS‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ U‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪H‬‬ ‫‪ m‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪L‬‬ ‫‪ q‬ﻣﺨﺒﺄ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ j‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 60 :H‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 176
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪BSS D‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 16 W‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ" ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )‪ ،(BSS‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 177
‫‪B‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 178
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺒﺄ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺒﺄ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺒﺄ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺒﺄ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ .
PAGE 179
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺗﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.
PAGE 180
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺷﺮﺍ ﹰﻗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ p‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ r‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ o‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺸﺮﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ "ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ‪.
PAGE 181
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ" )‪ (73A‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪25m 0s‬‬ ‫‪890‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪F3.
PAGE 182
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 99‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .
PAGE 183
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪.(75A) "AF‬‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪AF‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪F3.5‬‬ ‫‪1/250‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪AF‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪.AF‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ )‪.(76A‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫‪ s‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﻫﺪﻓﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻫﺞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .
PAGE 185
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ AF A‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ AF B‬ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.
PAGE 186
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ )‪.(39A‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ .(9A‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 187
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(" )‪ (40E‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 188
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ aC‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3.
PAGE 189
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺶ‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺭﻣﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 190
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ" )‪ (16E‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ" )‪ (6E‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ "ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ‪.
PAGE 191
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ (99‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟ ﹸﻨﺴﺦ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻧﹸﺴﺦ(‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻧﹸﺴﺦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ g (i‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .
PAGE 192
‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.3D‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 193
‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ (23F) DPOF‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DPOF‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫)‪.(36E‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 194
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ "ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ" ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‪.
PAGE 195
‫‪B‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )‪ ،(13E‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ )‪ (2E ,47A‬ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪.
PAGE 196
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ < ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(60E‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )‪(65E‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪(68E‬‬ ‫• ﻧﺴﺦ < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ )‪(71E‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪(73E‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ )‪(6E‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ )‪(8E‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ < ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪(82E‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ < ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ )‪(34A‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 197
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 198
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ .(66E‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.
PAGE 199
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪ p‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫)ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 200
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ l‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ" )‪.(69E‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪H‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .k‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )‪.
PAGE 201
‫ﻧﺴﺦ )ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 202
‫‪B‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ MOV‬ﻭ‪ WAV‬ﻭ‪ .MPO‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ )‪ (69E‬ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (60E‬ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 203
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ )ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ( )‪ (13E‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )‪ (32A‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ )‪.(81A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ .
PAGE 204
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪e‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪(75E) HS‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷ ﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 205
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‬ ‫• ﺇﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ )‪ (VBR‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪HS‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.
PAGE 206
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻭﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 207
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪(HS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪e‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ .HS‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1/4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1/2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،(75E) HS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ e) b‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 208
‫• ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ HS‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ،HS‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 209
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪HS‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪ (74E‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HS 480/4× h‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،HS 720/2× i‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،HS 1080/0.5× j‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﻀﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪:HS 480/4× h‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥﹴ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 210
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪HS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪e‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪HS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪) HS‬ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ HS‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .
PAGE 211
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪e‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Y‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﹸﺴﻤﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ .
PAGE 212
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪COOLPIX‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪82E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﻭﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (66E‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 213
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2013‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ K‬ﺃﻭ ‪) J‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻱ ﻭﺵ ﻭﺱ ﻭﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 214
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.K‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪1 5 / 0 5 / 2 0 1 3 1 5 :3 0‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1 5 / 0 5 / 2 0 1 3 1 5 :3 0‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪H‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ .
PAGE 215
‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ w‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ w‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 216
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 217
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪15 / 05 / 2013 15:30‬‬ ‫‪0004. JPG‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪+‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪25m 0s‬‬ ‫‪890‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﻃﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4/‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪15 / 05 / 2013 15:30‬‬ ‫‪0004.
PAGE 218
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫)‪.(63E‬‬ ‫‪15.05.2013‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ f‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 219
‫‪B‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺀﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 220
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 221
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ U‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪.(9A‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 222
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪92E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3.0‬ﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2.
PAGE 223
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 224
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺠﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 225
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )‪.(25A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪30‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 226
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 227
‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ )‪ (9E‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 228
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪Language/‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪Language/‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 34‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 229
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪TV‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪TV‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ 3D‬ﺣﺴﺐ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ NTSC‬ﻭ‪.PAL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 480p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 720p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .1080i‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ 480p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 720p‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 230
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.(86A) USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﹸﻣﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 231
‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ .USB‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 232
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺭﻣﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺭﻣﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺶ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫)‪ (73A‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻪ )‪ (51E‬ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪(AF‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (41A‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )‪ (41A‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪(42A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻭﻣﻀﺖ ﻋﻴﻨﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ
PAGE 233
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺭﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﺶ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ؟ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺛﻮﺍ ﹴﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺭﻣﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫)‪g (i‬‬ ‫)‪f (h‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪.g (i‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪.
PAGE 234
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪SSID‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(" )‪ (107A‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 235
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ N‬ﺃﻭ ‪ O‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.k‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.l‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 236
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ b‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ c‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻔﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺗﹸﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 237
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(57A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪(60A‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪(62A‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ )‪(64A‬‬ ‫‪0.
PAGE 238
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(40A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ )‪(44A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ )‪(42A‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ )‪(45A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪ HDR‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪(46A‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ )‪(48A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ )‪(48A‬‬ ‫‪Y‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ )‪(47A‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗ
PAGE 239
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ )‪(82E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(86E‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(86E‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ )‪(86E‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(88E‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ )‪(91E‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )‪(90E‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪(92E) AF‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )‪(93E‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪(94E‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺐ )‪(94E‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(95E‬‬ ‫‪(99E) HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪(99E) HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ 3D‬ﺣﺴﺐ ‪(99E) HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪(104E) Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘ
PAGE 240
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )‪(34E ,32E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )‪(64E‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )‪(73E‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (111E‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ ،"0001‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(34A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.
PAGE 241
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DSCN0001.JPG‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ )ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪.JPG‬‬ ‫‪.MOV‬‬ ‫‪.WAV‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 242
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 200‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪200‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 999‬ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 200‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،9999‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪ ،(96E‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 243
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪MH-66‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ(‬ ‫)ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ 50‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) EH-62G‬ﻭﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ(‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻳﺒﺮﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.
PAGE 244
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪) O‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ●) Q‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻨﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪114E‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 245
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ؟‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫–‬ ‫"ﻗﻔﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 246
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺊ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺭﻣﺸﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪116E‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‪.
PAGE 247
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 248
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 249
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺑﻄﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 250
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺘﺒﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﻧﻔﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﻧﻔﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ k‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪*.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 251
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪2F .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪2F ........................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪3F .......................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪4F .................................
PAGE 252
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ" )‪ (x-viiiA‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻪ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻓﹰﺎ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.
PAGE 253
‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﹸﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 254
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ؛ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻴﻞ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 255
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ EH-70P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .USB‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ" )‪ (22F‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 256
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺦ ﺩﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‪ .
PAGE 257
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 258
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻌﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8F‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 259
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ" ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .
PAGE 260
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪,91 ,86‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪,26E‬‬ ‫‪30E‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ‪17‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ ،A‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ e) b‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.d‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 261
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻄﺨﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻳﹸﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) W‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪104‬‬ ‫‪,68 ,45‬‬ ‫‪45E‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) W‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.
PAGE 262
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻘﻴﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ < ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺐ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪94E ,104‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 263
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪) V‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻧﻖ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 264
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ COOLPIX S5200‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪101‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 320 × 240‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪49‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 265
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.TV‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ (D‬ﻭﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪/USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 266
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ Nikon Transfer 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪16F‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .
PAGE 267
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ COOLPIX S5200‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 16.0‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺃﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻤﻞ )‪ (CMOS‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ 1/2.3‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ؛ ﻭﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ‪ 16.79‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻔﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ NIKKOR‬ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ×‪6‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 27.6-4.6‬ﻣﻢ )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺴﻤﻚ ‪ 156-26‬ﻣﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ ]‪([135‬‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‪6.5-3.
PAGE 268
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SD/SDHC/SDXC‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻭ‪ Exif 2.3‬ﻭ‪ DPOF‬ﻭ‪MPF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪JPEG :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪MPO :‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ(‪WAV :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) MOV :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،H.
PAGE 269
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ :ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ MTP‬ﻭ‪PTP‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪ NTSC‬ﻭ‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ‪ 480p‬ﻭ‪ 720p‬ﻭ‪1080i‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(A/V‬؛ ﺩﺧﻞ‪/
PAGE 270
‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 85%‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ(‬ ‫‪) IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫‪IEEE 802.11b: DBPSK/DQPSK/CCK‬‬ ‫‪IEEE 802.11g: OFDM‬‬ ‫‪IEEE 802.11n: OFDM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ )ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 10‬ﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 2462-2412‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ 11-1‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ(‬ ‫‪ 5 :IEEE 802.11b‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 20 :IEEE 802.
PAGE 271
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EN-EL19‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 3.7‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 700 ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺯﺍﺕ(‬ ‫‪ 31.5 × 39.5 × 6‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 14.5‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪EH-70P‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 240-100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 0.044-0.
PAGE 272
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪ Secure Digital (SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.
PAGE 273
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :DCF‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) :DPOF‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :Exif 2.3‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ (Exif ) 2.
PAGE 274
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻭ‪ QuickTime‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ iFrame‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ‪ iFrame‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬ ‫• ‪ Adobe‬ﻭ‪ Acrobat‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪.Adobe Systems Inc.
PAGE 275
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪38 ,26 ...................................‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪40.............................................‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ‪51.............................‬‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻴﻘﺔ‪53 ....................‬‬ ‫‪ c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪82 ,32 ..................................‬‬ ‫‪ h‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪6E ,82................‬‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪10E ,82 ..................‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪12E ,82 ......
PAGE 276
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪92 ,90 ...................................Nikon Transfer 2‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪90 ............................................Panorama Maker‬‬ ‫‪23F ,29E ,87 ........................PictBridge‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪111E............................................................RSCN‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪111E............................................................ SSCN‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪88 ........................................................... ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪111E...........................................
PAGE 277
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪40E ,68 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪34E ,33E .................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪5 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪70E ,15E ,34 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‪5 ...........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪6F ,8 ,5 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ‪31 ....................................................
PAGE 278
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪49E ,68 ..................................ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ‪43 ...................................f‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪65E ,84 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺥ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪104E ,107 ,105 ....................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪74E ,99 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪50E ,68......................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪73E ,13E ,85.......‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪63E ,61E ,22 .............................................
PAGE 279
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ‪5E ,47..............‬‬ ‫ﻍ‬ ‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ‪43 ...............................................................h‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪3 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪3 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪18 ,14 ,5..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪18 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪3 ......................................
PAGE 280
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪61 ,3 .............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪51...........................................o‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪86E ,104 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪40E ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪86E ,104 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ‪29 ,3 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪25 ,24 ,3 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺶ‪59E ,69.................................
PAGE 281
31F
PAGE 282
32F
PAGE 283
PAGE 284
‫ال يجوز عمل أي نسخة مهما كان شكلها من هذا الدليل كليا ً أو جزئيا ً (باستثناء‬ ‫االقتباس الموجز في المقاالت الناقدة أو المراجعات) دون تصريح خطي من نيكون‬ ‫كوربوريشن‪.